1-877-275-7048|Free delivery — 48 states|20-year warranty on 12ga
131+ Garage Configurations In Stock | Free Install on All Tubular Steel Orders

Metal Garages & Steel Garage Kits For Sale

Fully enclosed prefabricated steel garages with free delivery and professional installation in all 48 contiguous states. Standard, triple-wide and lean-to configurations. 12 or 14 gauge galvanized frames with a 20-year rust-through warranty.

$6,775
Starting Price
48
States Served
20yr
12-GA Warranty
$0
Install Fee
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock
Factory-Direct Pricing
20-Year Warranty — 12 Gauge
A+ BBB Accredited Since 2004
Free Delivery — All 48 States
Free Professional Installation Included
RTO & Easy Financing from $49/mo
Balance Due After Install — Not Before
35+ Carport Sizes In Stock

Filter Carports

Filters
Product Vehicles
Filter by State

Showing 1401–1440 of 2342 resultsSorted by price: low to high

Red steel structure office with flat roof and glass front beside landscaped parking

12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio | Steel and Stud, From $4,250

12

12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,850$4,250SAVE $600
or $89/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×24Home Office / Backyard Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio, built for daily backyard use.

Our 12×24 home office / backyard studio fits 12-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation.

You’re viewing:Home Office / Backyard Studio·Size12×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,250$4,850Save $600
or as low as $89/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×24
12×20
smaller
$3,550
12×24
this size
$4,250
12×30
longer
$5,300
14×24
wider
$4,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 288 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Package
  • HOA-Friendly Colors
  • French Door Option
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X24-HOME-OFFICE-BACKBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×24 home office / backyard studio.

12 feet wide × 24 feet long. Our 12×24 home office / backyard studio fits 12-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE12′ × 24′ · 288 sq ft

Home Office / Backyard Studio layout.

Our 12×24 home office / backyard studio fits 12-foot widths and 24-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers spec this as a backyard home office with insulation, drywall-ready interior, and a 36" entry door. 288 sq ft fits a desk zone, lounge corner, and a small kitchenette wall. Add wainscoting and Pewter Gray walls for residential curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office / Backyard Studio works well at 12×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office / Backyard Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
288 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office / Backyard Studio spec sheet.

Width12′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space288 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office / Backyard Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday home office / backyard studio
Everyday home office / backyard studio
288 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office / backyard studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
home office / backyard studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio, what makes it different.

288sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$89/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×24 home office / backyard studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $89/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×24?

288 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 24′ footprint with 288 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,304–$3,456 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office / Backyard Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office / Backyard Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,296+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office / Backyard Studio also viewed:

🏡 12×24

Single-Bay Garage

12×24 single-bay garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay Garage →

🏡 12×24

Backyard Workshop

12×24 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 12×24

Single Carport

12×24 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 12×24

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

12×24 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 12×24

Lawn Equipment Cover

12×24 lawn equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Cover →

🎯 12×24

Hobby Studio

12×24 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 12×24

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

12×24 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 12×24

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

12×24 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 12×24

Pump House / Well Cover

12×24 pump house / well cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Cover →

🏡 12×24

Bike & Gear Shed

12×24 bike & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Shed →

🌾 12×24

Tack Room / Feed Storage

12×24 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🎯 12×24

Backyard Office

12×24 backyard office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office / Backyard Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 12×24 home office / backyard studio cost?

A 12×24 home office / backyard studio from Steel and Stud starts at $4,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $89/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×24 home office / backyard studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×24 home office / backyard studio?

Almost always for 288+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office / backyard studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×24 home office / backyard studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×24 home office / backyard studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×24 home office / backyard studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $89/month on a 12×24 home office / backyard studio.

What warranty comes with the 12×24 home office / backyard studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×24 home office / backyard studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×24 home office / backyard studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×24 home office / backyard studio typically adds $2,304–$3,456 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office / Backyard Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel structure office with flat roof and glass front beside landscaped parking

12×24 Home Office / Backyard Studio

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel building farm shop with white roll up door, work van, and grain silo behind

12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover | Steel and Stud, From $4,900

12

12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,600$4,900SAVE $700
or $102/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×24Hay & Feed Storage Cover

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover? At 288 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×24 open-side cover, off the dirt.

You’re viewing:Hay & Feed Storage Cover·Size12×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,900$5,600Save $700
or as low as $102/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×24
12×20
smaller
$4,200
12×24
this size
$4,900
12×30
longer
$5,950
14×24
wider
$5,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 288 sq ft enclosed
  • 3-Side Enclosed
  • Vertical Roof
  • 65 PSF Snow
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X24-HAY-FEED-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×24 hay & feed storage cover.

12 feet wide × 24 feet long. Looking for a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover? At 288 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 24′ · 288 sq ft

Hay & Feed Storage Cover layout.

Looking for a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover? At 288 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small farmers stack roughly 80-100 square bales under a 12×24 open-side cover, off the dirt and out of the rain. Three-side enclosure with the long side open lets you back a flatbed straight up. Vertical roof prevents water pooling on long runs.

💡 Pro tip:Hay & Feed Storage Cover works well at 12×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
288 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hay & Feed Storage Cover spec sheet.

Width12′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space288 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hay & Feed Storage Cover.

DAILY USEEveryday hay & feed storage cover
Everyday hay & feed storage cover
288 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hay & feed storage cover.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
hay & feed storage cover + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover, what makes it different.

288sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$102/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×24 hay & feed storage cover is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $102/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×24?

288 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 24′ footprint with 288 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,304–$3,456 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hay & Feed Storage Cover shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hay & Feed Storage Cover · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,296+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hay & Feed Storage Cover also viewed:

🏡 12×24

Single-Bay Garage

12×24 single-bay garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay Garage →

🏡 12×24

Backyard Workshop

12×24 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 12×24

Single Carport

12×24 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 12×24

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

12×24 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 12×24

Lawn Equipment Cover

12×24 lawn equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Cover →

🎯 12×24

Hobby Studio

12×24 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 12×24

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

12×24 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 12×24

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

12×24 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 12×24

Pump House / Well Cover

12×24 pump house / well cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Cover →

🏡 12×24

Bike & Gear Shed

12×24 bike & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Shed →

🌾 12×24

Tack Room / Feed Storage

12×24 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🎯 12×24

Backyard Office

12×24 backyard office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hay & Feed Storage Cover questions, answered.

How much does a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover cost?

A 12×24 hay & feed storage cover from Steel and Stud starts at $4,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $102/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×24 hay & feed storage cover price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover?

Almost always for 288+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hay & feed storage cover different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $102/month on a 12×24 hay & feed storage cover.

What warranty comes with the 12×24 hay & feed storage cover?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×24 hay & feed storage cover in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×24 hay & feed storage cover stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Hay & Feed Storage Cover quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel building farm shop with white roll up door, work van, and grain silo behind

12×24 Hay & Feed Storage Cover

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Toy garage interior of a steel structure with motorcycles, ATV, tool wall, and jet ski outside

12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage | Steel and Stud, From $4,250

12

12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,850$4,250SAVE $600
or $89/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×24ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, built for hobby and recreational use.

12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of hobby-ready atv & side-by-side garage space. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

You’re viewing:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage·Size12×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,250$4,850Save $600
or as low as $89/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×24
12×20
smaller
$3,550
12×24
this size
$4,250
12×30
longer
$5,300
14×24
wider
$4,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 288 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Mud-Friendly Galvalume
  • Ground Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X24-ATV-SIDE-BY-SIDEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage.

12 feet wide × 24 feet long. 12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of hobby-ready atv & side-by-side garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area12′ × 24′ · 288 sq ft

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage layout.

12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of hobby-ready atv & side-by-side garage space. Roll-up door on the gable end lets you ride in and out without dismounting. Common spec for hunting cabins and rural hobbyists.

💡 Pro tip:ATV & Side-by-Side Garage works well at 12×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
288 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage spec sheet.

Width12′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space288 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV & Side-by-Side Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv & side-by-side garage
Everyday atv & side-by-side garage
288 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv & side-by-side garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
atv & side-by-side garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage, what makes it different.

288sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$89/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $89/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×24?

288 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 24′ footprint with 288 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,304–$3,456 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV & Side-by-Side Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,296+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV & Side-by-Side Garage also viewed:

🏡 12×24

Single-Bay Garage

12×24 single-bay garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay Garage →

🏡 12×24

Backyard Workshop

12×24 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 12×24

Single Carport

12×24 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 12×24

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

12×24 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 12×24

Lawn Equipment Cover

12×24 lawn equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Cover →

🎯 12×24

Hobby Studio

12×24 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 12×24

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

12×24 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 12×24

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

12×24 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 12×24

Pump House / Well Cover

12×24 pump house / well cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Cover →

🏡 12×24

Bike & Gear Shed

12×24 bike & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Shed →

🌾 12×24

Tack Room / Feed Storage

12×24 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🎯 12×24

Backyard Office

12×24 backyard office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV & Side-by-Side Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage cost?

A 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $89/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage?

Almost always for 288+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv & side-by-side garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $89/month on a 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage.

What warranty comes with the 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 12×24 atv & side-by-side garage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv & side-by-side garage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV & Side-by-Side Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Toy garage interior of a steel structure with motorcycles, ATV, tool wall, and jet ski outside

12×24 ATV & Side-by-Side Garage

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Coastal pool house interior in a metal building with shiplap walls, barn door, and towel bench

12×24 Pool House / Cabana

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×24 Pool House / Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $4,250

12

12×24 Pool House / Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,850$4,250SAVE $600
or $89/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×24Pool House / Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×24 Pool House / Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×24 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×24.

You’re viewing:Pool House / Cabana·Size12×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,250$4,850Save $600
or as low as $89/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×24
12×20
smaller
$3,550
12×24
this size
$4,250
12×30
longer
$5,300
14×24
wider
$4,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 288 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Custom Color Match
  • French Doors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X24-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×24 pool house / cabana.

12 feet wide × 24 feet long. 12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH12′ × 24′ · 288 sq ft ADU

Pool House / Cabana layout.

12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of everyday pool house / cabana space. Homeowners with an in-ground pool use the 12×24 as a pool house with a covered changing room, equipment storage, and a shaded lounge zone. Split it 12×24 enclosed plus a 12×24 open-side cover, same building, two functions.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House / Cabana works well at 12×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×24 Pool House / Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House / Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
288 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House / Cabana spec sheet.

Width12′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space288 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House / Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house / cabana
Everyday pool house / cabana
288 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house / cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house / cabana + seasonal storage
pool house / cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×24 Pool House / Cabana, what makes it different.

288sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$89/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×24 pool house / cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $89/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×24?

288 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 24′ footprint with 288 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,304–$3,456 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House / Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×24 Pool House / Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×24 Pool House / Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House / Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,296+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House / Cabana also viewed:

🏡 12×24

Single-Bay Garage

12×24 single-bay garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay Garage →

🏡 12×24

Backyard Workshop

12×24 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 12×24

Single Carport

12×24 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 12×24

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

12×24 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 12×24

Lawn Equipment Cover

12×24 lawn equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Cover →

🎯 12×24

Hobby Studio

12×24 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 12×24

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

12×24 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 12×24

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

12×24 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 12×24

Pump House / Well Cover

12×24 pump house / well cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Cover →

🏡 12×24

Bike & Gear Shed

12×24 bike & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Shed →

🌾 12×24

Tack Room / Feed Storage

12×24 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🎯 12×24

Backyard Office

12×24 backyard office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House / Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 12×24 pool house / cabana cost?

A 12×24 pool house / cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $4,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $89/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×24 pool house / cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house / cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×24 pool house / cabana?

Almost always for 288+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house / cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×24 pool house / cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×24 pool house / cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×24 pool house / cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $89/month on a 12×24 pool house / cabana.

What warranty comes with the 12×24 pool house / cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×24 pool house / cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×24 pool house / cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×24 pool house / cabana typically adds $2,304–$3,456 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House / Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Coastal pool house interior in a metal building with shiplap walls, barn door, and towel bench

12×24 Pool House / Cabana

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with red roof as a skid steer exits the open bay

12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors | Steel and Stud, From $4,250

12

12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$4,850$4,250SAVE $600
or $89/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×24Tool Shed for Contractors

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors, built for daily backyard use.

12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of everyday tool shed for contractors space. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×24 roll-up.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed for Contractors·Size12×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,250$4,850Save $600
or as low as $89/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×24
12×20
smaller
$3,550
12×24
this size
$4,250
12×30
longer
$5,300
14×24
wider
$4,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 288 sq ft enclosed
  • 12×12 Roll-Up
  • Deadbolt + Wi-Fi
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X24-TOOL-SHED-CONTRABuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×24 tool shed for contractors.

12 feet wide × 24 feet long. 12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of everyday tool shed for contractors space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP12′ × 24′ · 288 sq ft

Tool Shed for Contractors layout.

12×24 delivers 288 sq ft of everyday tool shed for contractors space. Self-employed trades use this as a locked tool shed at home: ladders, pipe stock, compressor, miter saw station, and stacked totes. The 12×24 roll-up swallows a full sheet of plywood flat. Slide bolt plus deadbolt plus Wi-Fi opener keeps it secure overnight.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed for Contractors works well at 12×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed for Contractors.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
288 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed for Contractors spec sheet.

Width12′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space288 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed for Contractors.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed for contractors
Everyday tool shed for contractors
288 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed for contractors.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
tool shed for contractors + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors, what makes it different.

288sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$89/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×24 tool shed for contractors is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $89/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×24?

288 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 24′ footprint with 288 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,304–$3,456 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed for Contractors shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed for Contractors · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,296+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed for Contractors also viewed:

🏡 12×24

Single-Bay Garage

12×24 single-bay garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay Garage →

🏡 12×24

Backyard Workshop

12×24 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 12×24

Single Carport

12×24 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 12×24

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

12×24 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 12×24

Lawn Equipment Cover

12×24 lawn equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Cover →

🎯 12×24

Hobby Studio

12×24 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 12×24

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

12×24 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 12×24

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

12×24 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 12×24

Pump House / Well Cover

12×24 pump house / well cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Cover →

🏡 12×24

Bike & Gear Shed

12×24 bike & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Shed →

🌾 12×24

Tack Room / Feed Storage

12×24 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🎯 12×24

Backyard Office

12×24 backyard office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed for Contractors questions, answered.

How much does a 12×24 tool shed for contractors cost?

A 12×24 tool shed for contractors from Steel and Stud starts at $4,250 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $89/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×24 tool shed for contractors price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×24 tool shed for contractors?

Almost always for 288+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed for contractors different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×24 tool shed for contractors need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×24 tool shed for contractors delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×24 tool shed for contractors without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $89/month on a 12×24 tool shed for contractors.

What warranty comes with the 12×24 tool shed for contractors?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×24 tool shed for contractors in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 12×24 tool shed for contractors add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 12×24 tool shed for contractors typically adds $2,304–$3,456 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed for Contractors quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with red roof as a skid steer exits the open bay

12×24 Tool Shed for Contractors

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,250.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel structure shelter with single-slope roof and timber posts at creekside sunset

12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $4,900

12

12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,600$4,900SAVE $700
or $102/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings12×24Tractor & Implement Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to? At 288 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Configured as a lean-to or attached to an existing pole barn, the 12×24 covers a.

You’re viewing:Tractor & Implement Lean-To·Size12×24·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,900$5,600Save $700
or as low as $102/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 12×24
12×20
smaller
$4,200
12×24
this size
$4,900
12×30
longer
$5,950
14×24
wider
$5,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 288 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Config
  • Attaches To Existing
  • Open Gables
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-12X24-TRACTOR-IMPLEMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to.

12 feet wide × 24 feet long. Looking for a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to? At 288 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack12′ × 24′ · 288 sq ft shop

Tractor & Implement Lean-To layout.

Looking for a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to? At 288 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Configured as a lean-to or attached to an existing pole barn, the 12×24 covers a sub-compact tractor with a 5′ brush hog, plus a box blade and post-hole digger lined up behind it. Open gable ends let you drive straight through.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor & Implement Lean-To works well at 12×24, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
288 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 12×24 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor & Implement Lean-To spec sheet.

Width12′
Length24′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space288 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor & Implement Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor & implement lean-to
Everyday tractor & implement lean-to
288 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor & implement lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
tractor & implement lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To, what makes it different.

288sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$102/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $102/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 12×24?

288 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 12′ × 24′ footprint with 288 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,304–$3,456 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor & Implement Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 12×24 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 12×24 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor & Implement Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
13×25×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,296+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor & Implement Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 12×24

Single-Bay Garage

12×24 single-bay garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single-Bay Garage →

🏡 12×24

Backyard Workshop

12×24 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 12×24

Single Carport

12×24 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 12×24

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

12×24 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 12×24

Lawn Equipment Cover

12×24 lawn equipment cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Cover →

🎯 12×24

Hobby Studio

12×24 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 12×24

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

12×24 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 12×24

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

12×24 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 12×24

Pump House / Well Cover

12×24 pump house / well cover configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Cover →

🏡 12×24

Bike & Gear Shed

12×24 bike & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Shed →

🌾 12×24

Tack Room / Feed Storage

12×24 tack room / feed storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,900Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Storage →

🎯 12×24

Backyard Office

12×24 backyard office configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,250Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor & Implement Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to cost?

A 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $4,900 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $102/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to?

Almost always for 288+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor & implement lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $102/month on a 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 12×24 tractor & implement lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor & Implement Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel structure shelter with single-slope roof and timber posts at creekside sunset

12×24 Tractor & Implement Lean-To

288 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

12′ x 24′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 12×24 steel building delivers 288 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,900.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark red steel garage with white paneled garage door and walk door at sunset

15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Single-Car Metal Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 single-car metal garage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners pick a 15×20 metal garage for one sedan or compact SUV with room left for a.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Metal Garage·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • 8×8 Roll-Up Door
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-SINGLE-CAR-METALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 single-car metal garage.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 single-car metal garage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft

Single-Car Metal Garage layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 single-car metal garage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Homeowners pick a 15×20 metal garage for one sedan or compact SUV with room left for a 4-foot workbench at the back wall. The 14-foot width gives you 2-3 feet of door clearance on each side of the vehicle, and an 15×20 roll-up door clears most full-size cars and small pickups comfortably.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Metal Garage works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car metal garage
Everyday single-car metal garage
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car metal garage + seasonal storage
single-car metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 single-car metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 single-car metal garage cost?

A 15×20 single-car metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 single-car metal garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 single-car metal garage?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 single-car metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 single-car metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 single-car metal garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 single-car metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 single-car metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 single-car metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 single-car metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 single-car metal garage typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark red steel garage with white paneled garage door and walk door at sunset

15×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with black roll-up door and diamond-window entry in a mountain meadow

15×20 Backyard Workshop

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Backyard Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Backyard Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Backyard Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Backyard Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

A 300 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along one wall. Insulation-ready frame keeps the space comfortable for evening woodworking or.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • From $5,495
  • Wired Ready
  • 14 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 backyard workshop.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. A 300 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along one wall.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft

Backyard Workshop layout.

A 300 sq ft hobby shop fits a workbench, pegboard wall, tool chest, small table saw or miter station, and deeper storage along one wall. Insulation-ready frame keeps the space comfortable for evening woodworking or tinkering year-round.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Backyard Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop
Everyday backyard workshop
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop + seasonal storage
backyard workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Backyard Workshop, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 backyard workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Backyard Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Backyard Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 backyard workshop cost?

A 15×20 backyard workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 backyard workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 backyard workshop?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 backyard workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 backyard workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 backyard workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 backyard workshop.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 backyard workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 backyard workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 backyard workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 backyard workshop typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal workshop with black roll-up door and diamond-window entry in a mountain meadow

15×20 Backyard Workshop

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel carport jet ski cover attached to yellow shed roof building near marina sailboats

15×20 Carport for One Vehicle

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Carport for One Vehicle | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Carport for One Vehicle
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Carport for One Vehicle

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Carport for One Vehicle, built for daily backyard use.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday carport for one vehicle space. An open 15×20 metal carport shelters one full-size pickup, SUV, or boat trailer for the lowest price point in the lineup, starting around $4,150.

You’re viewing:Carport for One Vehicle·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • Open Carport
  • Regular Roof
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-CARPORT-ONE-VEHIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 carport for one vehicle.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. 15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday carport for one vehicle space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft

Carport for One Vehicle layout.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday carport for one vehicle space. An open 15×20 metal carport shelters one full-size pickup, SUV, or boat trailer for the lowest price point in the lineup, starting around $4,150. Homeowners on a budget pick the open carport, then enclose it later as needs change. Vertical roof recommended for snow shedding.

💡 Pro tip:Carport for One Vehicle works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Carport for One Vehicle in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport for One Vehicle.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport for One Vehicle spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport for One Vehicle.

DAILY USEEveryday carport for one vehicle
Everyday carport for one vehicle
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport for one vehicle.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport for one vehicle + seasonal storage
carport for one vehicle + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Carport for One Vehicle, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 carport for one vehicle is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport for One Vehicle shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Carport for One Vehicle buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Carport for One Vehicle

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport for One Vehicle · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport for One Vehicle also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport for One Vehicle questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 carport for one vehicle cost?

A 15×20 carport for one vehicle from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 carport for one vehicle price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport for one vehicle ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 carport for one vehicle?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport for one vehicle different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 carport for one vehicle need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 carport for one vehicle delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 carport for one vehicle without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 carport for one vehicle.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 carport for one vehicle?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 carport for one vehicle in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 carport for one vehicle add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 carport for one vehicle typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport for One Vehicle quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel carport jet ski cover attached to yellow shed roof building near marina sailboats

15×20 Carport for One Vehicle

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

15×20 ATV and Toy Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 ATV and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 ATV and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20ATV and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 ATV and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 15×20 atv and toy storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Recreational property owners park two ATVs, a snowmobile, or a side-by-side plus gear.

You’re viewing:ATV and Toy Storage·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • 9×8 Roll-Up
  • Auger Ground Anchors
  • Galvalume Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-ATV-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 atv and toy storage.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 15×20 atv and toy storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft shop

ATV and Toy Storage layout.

Built for recreational use without site-build cost, this 15×20 atv and toy storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Recreational property owners park two ATVs, a snowmobile, or a side-by-side plus gear inside a 300 sq ft enclosed shelter. The 14-foot width handles two machines parked nose-in, and a 15×20 roll-up door lets you drive straight through without dismounting.

💡 Pro tip:ATV and Toy Storage works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 ATV and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv and toy storage
Everyday atv and toy storage
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv and toy storage + seasonal storage
atv and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 ATV and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 atv and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 ATV and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 ATV and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 atv and toy storage cost?

A 15×20 atv and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 atv and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 atv and toy storage?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 atv and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 atv and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 atv and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 atv and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 atv and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 atv and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 15×20 atv and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Metal shed storage interior with wire shelving, bins, hanging bikes, and riding mower entering

15×20 ATV and Toy Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with red roof as a skid steer exits the open bay

15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed | Steel and Stud, From $5,100

12

15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,800$5,100SAVE $700
or $106/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Tractor and Implement Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 15×20 tractor and implement shed? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage owners shelter a compact tractor with bucket plus a brush hog or tiller under.

You’re viewing:Tractor and Implement Shed·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,100$5,800Save $700
or as low as $106/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$5,100
15×25
longer
$6,200
16×20
wider
$5,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Lean-To Ready
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-TRACTOR-IMPLEMENBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 tractor and implement shed.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 15×20 tractor and implement shed? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft shop

Tractor and Implement Shed layout.

Looking for a 15×20 tractor and implement shed? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Small-acreage owners shelter a compact tractor with bucket plus a brush hog or tiller under a 15×20 with 10-12 foot legs. The taller side height clears most sub-compact tractors with ROPS up, and a lean-to addition on one side handles round bale storage.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor and Implement Shed works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor and Implement Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor and Implement Shed spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor and Implement Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor and implement shed
Everyday tractor and implement shed
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor and implement shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor and implement shed + seasonal storage
tractor and implement shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$106/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 tractor and implement shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $106/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor and Implement Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor and Implement Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor and Implement Shed also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor and Implement Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 tractor and implement shed cost?

A 15×20 tractor and implement shed from Steel and Stud starts at $5,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $106/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 tractor and implement shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor and implement shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 tractor and implement shed?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor and implement shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 tractor and implement shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 tractor and implement shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 tractor and implement shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $106/month on a 15×20 tractor and implement shed.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 tractor and implement shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 tractor and implement shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 15×20 tractor and implement shed stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor and Implement Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White prefab metal building with red roof as a skid steer exits the open bay

15×20 Tractor and Implement Shed

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Wood-look metal building office studio with corner porch and large glass windows in a backyard

15×20 Home Office Conversion

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Home Office Conversion | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Home Office Conversion
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Home Office Conversion

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Home Office Conversion, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 home office conversion packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Remote workers convert a 15×20 metal building into a detached home office with R-19.

You’re viewing:Home Office Conversion·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Storefront Windows
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-HOME-OFFICE-CONVBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 home office conversion.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 home office conversion packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft

Home Office Conversion layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 home office conversion packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Remote workers convert a 15×20 metal building into a detached home office with R-19 insulation, two storefront windows, a 15×20 walk-in door, and an HVAC mini-split. 300 sq ft fits a desk, file cabinets, a small meeting table, and bookshelves comfortably.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office Conversion works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Home Office Conversion in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office Conversion.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office Conversion spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office Conversion.

DAILY USEEveryday home office conversion
Everyday home office conversion
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office conversion.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office conversion + seasonal storage
home office conversion + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Home Office Conversion, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 home office conversion is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office Conversion shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Home Office Conversion buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Home Office Conversion

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office Conversion · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office Conversion also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office Conversion questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 home office conversion cost?

A 15×20 home office conversion from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 home office conversion price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office conversion ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 home office conversion?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office conversion different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 home office conversion need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 home office conversion delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 home office conversion without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 home office conversion.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 home office conversion?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 home office conversion in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 home office conversion add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 home office conversion typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office Conversion quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Wood-look metal building office studio with corner porch and large glass windows in a backyard

15×20 Home Office Conversion

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Slate blue commercial metal building with hip roof, window awnings, and glass entry doors

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Hobby Room and Studio

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio, built for daily backyard use.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday hobby room and studio space. Quilters, painters, ceramicists, and musicians use a 15×20 as a dedicated hobby room separate from the house. Vertical roof, full insulation, and.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room and Studio·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Vertical Roof
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-HOBBY-ROOM-STUDIBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 hobby room and studio.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. 15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday hobby room and studio space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑15′ × 20′ · 300 ground + loft

Hobby Room and Studio layout.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday hobby room and studio space. Quilters, painters, ceramicists, and musicians use a 15×20 as a dedicated hobby room separate from the house. Vertical roof, full insulation, and wainscoting give the inside a finished feel, while two 15×20 windows pull in north light for studio work.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room and Studio works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Hobby Room and Studio in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room and Studio.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room and Studio spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room and Studio.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room and studio
Everyday hobby room and studio
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room and studio.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room and studio + seasonal storage
hobby room and studio + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 hobby room and studio is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room and Studio shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Hobby Room and Studio buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Hobby Room and Studio

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room and Studio · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room and Studio also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room and Studio questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 hobby room and studio cost?

A 15×20 hobby room and studio from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 hobby room and studio price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room and studio ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 hobby room and studio?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room and studio different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 hobby room and studio need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 hobby room and studio delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 hobby room and studio without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 hobby room and studio.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 hobby room and studio?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 hobby room and studio in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 hobby room and studio add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 hobby room and studio typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room and Studio quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Slate blue commercial metal building with hip roof, window awnings, and glass entry doors

15×20 Hobby Room and Studio

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

15×20 Pool House and Cabana

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Pool House and Cabana | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Pool House and Cabana
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Pool House and Cabana

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Pool House and Cabana, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 pool house and cabana packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Backyard pool owners install a 15×20 as a pool house with French doors, a covered lean-to.

You’re viewing:Pool House and Cabana·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • French Doors
  • Lean-To Porch
  • Boxed Eave Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-POOL-HOUSE-CABANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 pool house and cabana.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 pool house and cabana packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft ADU

Pool House and Cabana layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 15×20 pool house and cabana packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Backyard pool owners install a 15×20 as a pool house with French doors, a covered lean-to porch, and an open changing area inside. The boxed-eave A-frame roof reads as residential, and the 17 standard colors let you match the home’s siding and trim.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House and Cabana works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Pool House and Cabana in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House and Cabana.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House and Cabana spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House and Cabana.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house and cabana
Everyday pool house and cabana
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house and cabana.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house and cabana + seasonal storage
pool house and cabana + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Pool House and Cabana, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 pool house and cabana is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House and Cabana shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Pool House and Cabana buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Pool House and Cabana

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House and Cabana · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House and Cabana also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House and Cabana questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 pool house and cabana cost?

A 15×20 pool house and cabana from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 pool house and cabana price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house and cabana ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 pool house and cabana?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house and cabana different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 pool house and cabana need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 pool house and cabana delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 pool house and cabana without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 pool house and cabana.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 pool house and cabana?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 pool house and cabana in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 pool house and cabana add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 pool house and cabana typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House and Cabana quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White steel structure poolside cabana with glass door, black-trimmed windows and lounge chairs

15×20 Pool House and Cabana

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal garage with roll-up door and a red sport bike parked on the driveway

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage | Steel and Stud, From $4,450

12

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,050$4,450SAVE $600
or $93/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage, built for daily backyard use.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday lawn equipment and mower storage space. Homeowners with a half-acre or more use a 15×20 to store a zero-turn mower, push mower, snow blower, hand tools, and bagged fertilizer in one.

You’re viewing:Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,450$5,050Save $600
or as low as $93/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$4,450
15×25
longer
$5,550
16×20
wider
$4,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • Mezzanine Loft
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Gable Vents
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-LAWN-EQUIPMENT-MBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. 15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday lawn equipment and mower storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft shop

Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage layout.

15×20 delivers 300 sq ft of everyday lawn equipment and mower storage space. Homeowners with a half-acre or more use a 15×20 to store a zero-turn mower, push mower, snow blower, hand tools, and bagged fertilizer in one organized space. Pegboard walls and a small mezzanine over the door deck out the interior for full lawn-equipment storage.

💡 Pro tip:Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday lawn equipment and mower storage
Everyday lawn equipment and mower storage
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a lawn equipment and mower storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWlawn equipment and mower storage + seasonal storage
lawn equipment and mower storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$93/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $93/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage cost?

A 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,450 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $93/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud lawn equipment and mower storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud lawn equipment and mower storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $93/month on a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 15×20 lawn equipment and mower storage typically adds $2,400–$3,600 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal garage with roll-up door and a red sport bike parked on the driveway

15×20 Lawn Equipment and Mower Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,450.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with black gable roof and open drive-through bays at sunset

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $5,100

12

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,800$5,100SAVE $700
or $106/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Garden Shed with Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

Looking for a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Sliding barn doors on the gable end add curb appeal.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed with Lean-To·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,100$5,800Save $700
or as low as $106/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$5,100
15×25
longer
$6,200
16×20
wider
$5,400
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • 6′ Lean-To
  • Sliding Barn Doors
  • Skylight
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-GARDEN-SHED-LEANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 garden shed with lean-to.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft shop

Garden Shed with Lean-To layout.

Looking for a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to? At 300 sq ft, this footprint suits farm storage, tractor cover, or tack rooms. Sliding barn doors on the gable end add curb appeal.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed with Lean-To works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed with Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed with Lean-To spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed with Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed with lean-to
Everyday garden shed with lean-to
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed with lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
garden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$106/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 garden shed with lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $106/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed with Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed with Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed with Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed with Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to cost?

A 15×20 garden shed with lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $5,100 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $106/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 garden shed with lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $106/month on a 15×20 garden shed with lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 garden shed with lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 garden shed with lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 15×20 garden shed with lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed with Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream steel carport with black gable roof and open drive-through bays at sunset

15×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,100.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage | Steel and Stud, From $6,300

12

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,200$6,300SAVE $900
or $131/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings15×20Job Site and Contractor Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 15×20 job site and contractor storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and small-business owners use a 15×20 prefab building as a.

You’re viewing:Job Site and Contractor Storage·Size15×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,300$7,200Save $900
or as low as $131/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 15×20
15×20
this size
$6,300
15×25
longer
$7,400
16×20
wider
$6,600
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 300 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 26 GA Panels
  • Deadbolt Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-15X20-JOB-SITE-CONTRACBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 15×20 job site and contractor storage.

15 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 15×20 job site and contractor storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack15′ × 20′ · 300 sq ft shop

Job Site and Contractor Storage layout.

Built for business owners who need fast permitted occupancy, this 15×20 job site and contractor storage packs 300 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Contractors and small-business owners use a 15×20 prefab building as a secure on-site tool crib, materials cache, or rural-office mobile-anchored structure. 12-gauge framing and a 26-gauge roof handle daily abuse, and deadbolt-rated walk-in doors keep gear locked down.

💡 Pro tip:Job Site and Contractor Storage works well at 15×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Job Site and Contractor Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
300 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 15×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Job Site and Contractor Storage spec sheet.

Width15′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space300 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Job Site and Contractor Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday job site and contractor storage
Everyday job site and contractor storage
300 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a job site and contractor storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWjob site and contractor storage + seasonal storage
job site and contractor storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage, what makes it different.

300sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$131/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 15×20 job site and contractor storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $131/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 15×20?

300 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 15′ × 20′ footprint with 300 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,400–$3,600 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Job Site and Contractor Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 15×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 15×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Job Site and Contractor Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
16×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,350+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Job Site and Contractor Storage also viewed:

🏡 15×20

Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage

15×20 compact garage / small suv garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Compact Garage / Small SUV Garage →

🏡 15×20

Backyard Workshop

15×20 backyard workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Workshop →

🏡 15×20

Single Carport

15×20 single carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Single Carport →

🏡 15×20

Tool Shed / Garden Storage

15×20 tool shed / garden storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tool Shed / Garden Storage →

🏡 15×20

Lawn Equipment Shelter

15×20 lawn equipment shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn Equipment Shelter →

🎯 15×20

Hobby Studio

15×20 hobby studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Studio →

🌾 15×20

Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter

15×20 chicken coop / small animal shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Chicken Coop / Small Animal Shelter →

🎯 15×20

She Shed / Backyard Retreat

15×20 she shed / backyard retreat configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize She Shed / Backyard Retreat →

🏡 15×20

Pump House / Well Shed

15×20 pump house / well shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Pump House / Well Shed →

🏡 15×20

Bike & Gear Storage

15×20 bike & gear storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Bike & Gear Storage →

🌾 15×20

Tack Room / Feed Shed

15×20 tack room / feed shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,100Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Tack Room / Feed Shed →

🎯 15×20

Backyard Office / Studio

15×20 backyard office / studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,450Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard Office / Studio →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Job Site and Contractor Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 15×20 job site and contractor storage cost?

A 15×20 job site and contractor storage from Steel and Stud starts at $6,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $131/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 15×20 job site and contractor storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud job site and contractor storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 15×20 job site and contractor storage?

Almost always for 300+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud job site and contractor storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 15×20 job site and contractor storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 15×20 job site and contractor storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 15×20 job site and contractor storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $131/month on a 15×20 job site and contractor storage.

What warranty comes with the 15×20 job site and contractor storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 15×20 job site and contractor storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 15×20 job site and contractor storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Job Site and Contractor Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Equipment shed interior of a steel structure with John Deere compact tractor and tool storage

15×20 Job Site and Contractor Storage

300 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

15′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 15×20 steel building delivers 300 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Blue metal garage with white raised-panel door and glazed entry in open countryside

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Single-Car Metal Garage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage, built for daily backyard use.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of everyday single-car metal garage space. Homeowners who want one secure parking bay plus storage pick this layout most. A 16×20 metal garage fits a full-size pickup or SUV with 4-5 feet of.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Metal Garage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • Vertical Roof
  • 8×8 Roll-Up
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-SINGLE-CAR-METALBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 single-car metal garage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of everyday single-car metal garage space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Single-Car Metal Garage layout.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of everyday single-car metal garage space. Homeowners who want one secure parking bay plus storage pick this layout most. A 16×20 metal garage fits a full-size pickup or SUV with 4-5 feet of walk-around clearance and a workbench wall on one side. The 9-foot leg keeps the roll-up door at 16×20, clean fit for an F-150.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Metal Garage works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Metal Garage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Metal Garage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Metal Garage.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car metal garage
Everyday single-car metal garage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car metal garage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car metal garage + seasonal storage
single-car metal garage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 single-car metal garage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Metal Garage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Metal Garage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Metal Garage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Metal Garage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 single-car metal garage cost?

A 16×20 single-car metal garage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 single-car metal garage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car metal garage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 single-car metal garage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car metal garage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 single-car metal garage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 single-car metal garage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 single-car metal garage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 single-car metal garage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 single-car metal garage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 single-car metal garage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 single-car metal garage add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 single-car metal garage typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Metal Garage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Blue metal garage with white raised-panel door and glazed entry in open countryside

16×20 Single-Car Metal Garage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with black trim and open bay revealing a workshop, pickup truck parked nearby

16×20 Metal Workshop

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Metal Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Metal Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Metal Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Metal Workshop, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 16×20 metal workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building furniture, restoring bikes, or running a side trade pick the workshop config.

You’re viewing:Metal Workshop·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • 2 Windows
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-METAL-WORKSHOPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 metal workshop.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 16×20 metal workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Metal Workshop layout.

Looking for a 16×20 metal workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Hobbyists building furniture, restoring bikes, or running a side trade pick the workshop config. 320 sq ft holds a 10-foot bench, table saw, drill press, and rolling tool chests with floor space left to swing 8-foot stock. Add a walk-in door and two 16×20 windows for natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Metal Workshop works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Metal Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Metal Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Metal Workshop spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Metal Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday metal workshop
Everyday metal workshop
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a metal workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmetal workshop + seasonal storage
metal workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Metal Workshop, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 metal workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Metal Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Metal Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Metal Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Metal Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Metal Workshop also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Metal Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 metal workshop cost?

A 16×20 metal workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 metal workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud metal workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 metal workshop?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud metal workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 metal workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 metal workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 metal workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 metal workshop.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 metal workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 metal workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 metal workshop add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 metal workshop typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Metal Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel garage with black trim and open bay revealing a workshop, pickup truck parked nearby

16×20 Metal Workshop

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Golden metal shed with black roll-up door and window overlooking a mountain valley

16×20 Storage Shed

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Storage Shed | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Storage Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Storage Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Storage Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Our 16×20 storage shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Small property owners use this footprint to clear out the basement and the cramped.

You’re viewing:Storage Shed·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 29 GA Panels
  • Regular Roof
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-STORAGE-SHEDBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 storage shed.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 16×20 storage shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft shop

Storage Shed layout.

Our 16×20 storage shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Small property owners use this footprint to clear out the basement and the cramped wood shed in one move. Lawn equipment storage at this size handles a riding mower, push mower, snowblower, two trimmers, and shelving along all four walls. 8-foot legs keep the kit price near the $5,650 floor.

💡 Pro tip:Storage Shed works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Storage Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Storage Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Storage Shed spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Storage Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday storage shed
Everyday storage shed
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a storage shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWstorage shed + seasonal storage
storage shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Storage Shed, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 storage shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Storage Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Storage Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Storage Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Storage Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Storage Shed also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Storage Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 storage shed cost?

A 16×20 storage shed from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 storage shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud storage shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 storage shed?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud storage shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 storage shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 storage shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 storage shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 storage shed.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 storage shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 storage shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 storage shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 storage shed typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Storage Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Golden metal shed with black roll-up door and window overlooking a mountain valley

16×20 Storage Shed

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

16×20 Backyard Home Office

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Backyard Home Office | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Backyard Home Office
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Backyard Home Office

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Backyard Home Office, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 backyard home office packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Remote workers buy a 16×20 prefab building when the spare bedroom won’t cut it. 320 square.

You’re viewing:Backyard Home Office·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Panels
  • French Doors
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-BACKYARD-HOME-OFBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 backyard home office.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 backyard home office packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Backyard Home Office layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 backyard home office packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Remote workers buy a 16×20 prefab building when the spare bedroom won’t cut it. 320 square feet leaves room for a desk wall, conference seating for two clients, a printer cabinet, and a mini-split HVAC. Insulated panels and a French door make it feel like an actual office, not a shed.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Home Office works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Backyard Home Office in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Home Office.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Home Office spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Home Office.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard home office
Everyday backyard home office
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard home office.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard home office + seasonal storage
backyard home office + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Backyard Home Office, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 backyard home office is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Home Office shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Backyard Home Office buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Backyard Home Office

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Home Office · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Home Office also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Home Office questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 backyard home office cost?

A 16×20 backyard home office from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 backyard home office price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard home office ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 backyard home office?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard home office different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 backyard home office need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 backyard home office delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 backyard home office without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 backyard home office.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 backyard home office?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 backyard home office in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 backyard home office add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 backyard home office typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Home Office quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
White metal building kit office studio with black metal roof and three large windows

16×20 Backyard Home Office

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Hobby Room / She-Shed

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed, built for daily backyard use.

Our 16×20 hobby room / she-shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Crafters, quilters, and home-gym owners pick this build for a dedicated.

You’re viewing:Hobby Room / She-Shed·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Wainscoting
  • Skylights
  • Walk-In Door
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-HOBBY-ROOM-SHE-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 hobby room / she-shed.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 16×20 hobby room / she-shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2↑ LOFT ABOVE ↑16′ × 20′ · 320 ground + loft

Hobby Room / She-Shed layout.

Our 16×20 hobby room / she-shed fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Crafters, quilters, and home-gym owners pick this build for a dedicated retreat away from the house. The 16-foot width fits a Peloton plus a yoga zone, or a long quilting table with two storage walls. Wainscoting and Barn Red trim turn the steel exterior into curb appeal, not eyesore.

💡 Pro tip:Hobby Room / She-Shed works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Hobby Room / She-Shed.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Hobby Room / She-Shed spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Hobby Room / She-Shed.

DAILY USEEveryday hobby room / she-shed
Everyday hobby room / she-shed
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a hobby room / she-shed.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhobby room / she-shed + seasonal storage
hobby room / she-shed + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 hobby room / she-shed is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Hobby Room / She-Shed shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Hobby Room / She-Shed · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Hobby Room / She-Shed also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Hobby Room / She-Shed questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed cost?

A 16×20 hobby room / she-shed from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 hobby room / she-shed price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud hobby room / she-shed ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud hobby room / she-shed different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 hobby room / she-shed?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 hobby room / she-shed in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 hobby room / she-shed add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 hobby room / she-shed typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Hobby Room / She-Shed quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure wellness studio in dusty rose with covered workout porch and glass doors

16×20 Hobby Room / She-Shed

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Navy blue prefab metal building gym beside a backyard pool at dusk with warm lighting

16×20 Pool House

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Pool House | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Pool House
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Pool House

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Pool House, built for daily backyard use.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 pool house packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Backyard pool owners use 16×20 buildings for a changing room, equipment closet, and covered outdoor.

You’re viewing:Pool House·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Lean-To Add-On
  • Half Enclosure
  • Vertical Roof
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-POOL-HOUSEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 pool house.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 pool house packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

GARAGEKITCHEN+LIVINGBEDROOMBATH16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft ADU

Pool House layout.

Built for homeowners who want more covered space, this 16×20 pool house packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Backyard pool owners use 16×20 buildings for a changing room, equipment closet, and covered outdoor lounge in one structure. Half enclosure plus a 12-foot lean-to gives shaded patio space without permitting a separate cabana. Pewter Gray with White trim is the popular combo.

💡 Pro tip:Pool House works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Pool House in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Pool House.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Pool House spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Pool House.

DAILY USEEveryday pool house
Everyday pool house
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a pool house.
STORAGE OVERFLOWpool house + seasonal storage
pool house + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Pool House, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 pool house is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Pool House shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Pool House buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Pool House

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Pool House · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Pool House also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Pool House questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 pool house cost?

A 16×20 pool house from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 pool house price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud pool house ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 pool house?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud pool house different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 pool house need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 pool house delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 pool house without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 pool house.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 pool house?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 pool house in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 pool house add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 pool house typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Pool House quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Navy blue prefab metal building gym beside a backyard pool at dusk with warm lighting

16×20 Pool House

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with drive-through bay sheltering a John Deere tractor on a farm

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To | Steel and Stud, From $5,400

12

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,150$5,400SAVE $750
or $113/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Garden Shed with Lean-To

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To, built for farm and ranch demands.

Our 16×20 garden shed with lean-to fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Gardeners running raised beds and a small orchard need more than a 16×20.

You’re viewing:Garden Shed with Lean-To·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,400$6,150Save $750
or as low as $113/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$4,450
16×20
this size
$5,400
16×24
longer
$6,300
18×20
wider
$5,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Galvalume Roof
  • Sliding Barn Door
  • Lean-To
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-GARDEN-SHED-LEANBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 garden shed with lean-to.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Our 16×20 garden shed with lean-to fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft shop

Garden Shed with Lean-To layout.

Our 16×20 garden shed with lean-to fits 16-foot widths and 20-foot lengths to give you durable cover that handles snow, wind, and feed loads. Gardeners running raised beds and a small orchard need more than a 16×20 plastic shed. 320 sq ft holds a potting bench, two wall-length tool racks, bagged soil pallets, and a wheelbarrow with room to maneuver. Add a 6-foot lean-to for tractor or UTV cover.

💡 Pro tip:Garden Shed with Lean-To works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Garden Shed with Lean-To.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Garden Shed with Lean-To spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Garden Shed with Lean-To.

DAILY USEEveryday garden shed with lean-to
Everyday garden shed with lean-to
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a garden shed with lean-to.
STORAGE OVERFLOWgarden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
garden shed with lean-to + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$113/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 garden shed with lean-to is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $113/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Garden Shed with Lean-To shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Garden Shed with Lean-To · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Garden Shed with Lean-To also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Garden Shed with Lean-To questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to cost?

A 16×20 garden shed with lean-to from Steel and Stud starts at $5,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $113/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 garden shed with lean-to price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud garden shed with lean-to different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $113/month on a 16×20 garden shed with lean-to.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 garden shed with lean-to?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 garden shed with lean-to in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 16×20 garden shed with lean-to stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Garden Shed with Lean-To quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal barn with drive-through bay sheltering a John Deere tractor on a farm

16×20 Garden Shed with Lean-To

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior with pass-through bays holding a red tractor and Bobcat skid steer

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $5,400

12

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$6,150$5,400SAVE $750
or $113/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers and acreage owners park a compact tractor, two ATVs, and a UTV with attachments.

You’re viewing:Tool Shed and Equipment Storage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$5,400$6,150Save $750
or as low as $113/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$4,450
16×20
this size
$5,400
16×24
longer
$6,300
18×20
wider
$5,950
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • 10×10 Roll-Up
  • 12 GA Frame
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-TOOL-SHED-EQUIPMBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Built for farm and ranch operations, this 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage layout.

Built for farm and ranch operations, this 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage packs 320 sq ft into a code-compliant shell. Hobby farmers and acreage owners park a compact tractor, two ATVs, and a UTV with attachments hung on the wall. 12-foot legs clear roll cages and ROPS bars. The 16-by-24 metal building footprint is the smallest that handles full-size lawn and garden equipment with a workbench.

💡 Pro tip:Tool Shed and Equipment Storage works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tool Shed and Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tool shed and equipment storage
Everyday tool shed and equipment storage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tool shed and equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtool shed and equipment storage + seasonal storage
tool shed and equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$113/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $113/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tool Shed and Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tool Shed and Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tool Shed and Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage cost?

A 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $5,400 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $113/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tool shed and equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tool shed and equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $113/month on a 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 16×20 tool shed and equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tool Shed and Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Steel structure interior with pass-through bays holding a red tractor and Bobcat skid steer

16×20 Tool Shed and Equipment Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$5,400.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20ATV and Toy Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage, built for hobby and recreational use.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space. Two ATVs plus a small fishing boat on a trailer fit cleanly with 320 sq ft. The 16-foot width parks them parallel; the 24-foot depth leaves a back wall.

You’re viewing:ATV and Toy Storage·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • Vertical Roof
  • Anchored Concrete
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-ATV-TOY-STORAGEBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 atv and toy storage.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft shop

ATV and Toy Storage layout.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of hobby-ready atv and toy storage space. Two ATVs plus a small fishing boat on a trailer fit cleanly with 320 sq ft. The 16-foot width parks them parallel; the 24-foot depth leaves a back wall for gear, life jackets, and a fuel cabinet. A 16×20 roll-up handles trailered loads without tilting masts or windshields.

💡 Pro tip:ATV and Toy Storage works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV and Toy Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV and Toy Storage spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV and Toy Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv and toy storage
Everyday atv and toy storage
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv and toy storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv and toy storage + seasonal storage
atv and toy storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 atv and toy storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV and Toy Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV and Toy Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV and Toy Storage also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV and Toy Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 atv and toy storage cost?

A 16×20 atv and toy storage from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 atv and toy storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv and toy storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 atv and toy storage?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv and toy storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 atv and toy storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 atv and toy storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 atv and toy storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 atv and toy storage.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 atv and toy storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 atv and toy storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×20 atv and toy storage for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a atv and toy storage to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your ATV and Toy Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal building equipment shed with open white roll-up door and John Deere zero turn mower

16×20 ATV and Toy Storage

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Toy garage interior of a steel structure with motorcycles, ATV, tool wall, and jet ski outside

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop, built for hobby and recreational use.

Looking for a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders with three to four bikes plus a lift table and tool chest land at this size.

You’re viewing:Motorcycle Garage and Workshop·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulation Ready
  • Walk-In Door
  • Window Kit
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-MOTORCYCLE-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop layout.

Looking for a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits home gyms, hunting cabins, or backyard retreats. Riders with three to four bikes plus a lift table and tool chest land at this size after outgrowing a 16×20. 320 square feet holds the lift, a parts washer, an air compressor, and four bikes parked diagonally. Insulated panels keep winter wrenching tolerable.

💡 Pro tip:Motorcycle Garage and Workshop works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Motorcycle Garage and Workshop.

DAILY USEEveryday motorcycle garage and workshop
Everyday motorcycle garage and workshop
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a motorcycle garage and workshop.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmotorcycle garage and workshop + seasonal storage
motorcycle garage and workshop + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Motorcycle Garage and Workshop shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Motorcycle Garage and Workshop also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Motorcycle Garage and Workshop questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop cost?

A 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud motorcycle garage and workshop ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud motorcycle garage and workshop different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 16×20 motorcycle garage and workshop for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a motorcycle garage and workshop to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Motorcycle Garage and Workshop quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Toy garage interior of a steel structure with motorcycles, ATV, tool wall, and jet ski outside

16×20 Motorcycle Garage and Workshop

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay | Steel and Stud, From $4,750

12

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$5,400$4,750SAVE $650
or $99/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Carport with Storage Bay

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 16×20 carport with storage bay? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Buyers who want vehicle cover plus a locked storage room split the 16×20 carport kit.

You’re viewing:Carport with Storage Bay·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$4,750$5,400Save $650
or as low as $99/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$3,800
16×20
this size
$4,750
16×24
longer
$5,650
18×20
wider
$5,300
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Partial Enclosure
  • Open Front
  • Boxed Eave
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-CARPORT-STORAGE-Built:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 carport with storage bay.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. Looking for a 16×20 carport with storage bay? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Carport with Storage Bay layout.

Looking for a 16×20 carport with storage bay? At 320 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Buyers who want vehicle cover plus a locked storage room split the 16×20 carport kit into a 16×20 open bay and a 16×20 enclosed end. One car parks under cover; the back room locks down tools, tires, and yard equipment. Cheapest configuration on this footprint.

💡 Pro tip:Carport with Storage Bay works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Carport with Storage Bay in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Carport with Storage Bay.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Carport with Storage Bay spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Carport with Storage Bay.

DAILY USEEveryday carport with storage bay
Everyday carport with storage bay
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a carport with storage bay.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcarport with storage bay + seasonal storage
carport with storage bay + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$99/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 carport with storage bay is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $99/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Carport with Storage Bay shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Carport with Storage Bay buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Carport with Storage Bay

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Carport with Storage Bay · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Carport with Storage Bay also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Carport with Storage Bay questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 carport with storage bay cost?

A 16×20 carport with storage bay from Steel and Stud starts at $4,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $99/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 carport with storage bay price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud carport with storage bay ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 carport with storage bay?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud carport with storage bay different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 carport with storage bay need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 carport with storage bay delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 carport with storage bay without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $99/month on a 16×20 carport with storage bay.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 carport with storage bay?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 carport with storage bay in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 16×20 carport with storage bay add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 16×20 carport with storage bay typically adds $2,560–$3,840 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Carport with Storage Bay quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green steel structure run-in shelter with wood posts on a fenced grassy pasture

16×20 Carport with Storage Bay

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$4,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red prefab metal building storefront with large windows and covered side entry

16×20 Small Business Storefront

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

16×20 Small Business Storefront | Steel and Stud, From $6,600

12

16×20 Small Business Storefront
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$7,500$6,600SAVE $900
or $138/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings16×20Small Business Storefront

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

16×20 Small Business Storefront, engineered for code-compliant business use.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of code-compliant small business storefront space. Storefront windows on the 16-foot face, a walk-in door, and wainscoting in two-tone color give it the small-shop look without ground-up.

You’re viewing:Small Business Storefront·Size16×20·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$6,600$7,500Save $900
or as low as $138/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 16×20
16×16
smaller
$5,650
16×20
this size
$6,600
16×24
longer
$7,500
18×20
wider
$7,150
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 320 sq ft enclosed
  • Storefront Windows
  • Wainscoting
  • Certified Build
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-16X20-SMALL-BUSINESS-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 16×20 small business storefront.

16 feet wide × 20 feet long. 16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of code-compliant small business storefront space.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE16′ × 20′ · 320 sq ft

Small Business Storefront layout.

16×20 delivers 320 sq ft of code-compliant small business storefront space. Storefront windows on the 16-foot face, a walk-in door, and wainscoting in two-tone color give it the small-shop look without ground-up construction. IBC-stamped where required.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Storefront works well at 16×20, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 16×20 Small Business Storefront in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Storefront.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
320 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 16×20 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Storefront spec sheet.

Width16′
Length20′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space320 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Storefront.

DAILY USEEveryday small business storefront
Everyday small business storefront
320 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business storefront.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business storefront + seasonal storage
small business storefront + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

16×20 Small Business Storefront, what makes it different.

320sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$138/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 16×20 small business storefront is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $138/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 16×20?

320 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 16′ × 20′ footprint with 320 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $2,560–$3,840 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Storefront shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 16×20 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 16×20 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 16×20 Small Business Storefront buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 16×20 Small Business Storefront

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Storefront · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
17×21×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$1,440+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Storefront also viewed:

🏡 16×20

1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage

16×20 1-car 16×20 metal garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize 1-Car 16×20 Metal Garage →

🏡 16×20

Home Workshop

16×20 home workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Home Workshop →

🏡 16×20

Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed

16×20 backyard 16×20 metal shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Backyard 16×20 Metal Shed →

🏡 16×20

Hobby & Craft Studio

16×20 hobby & craft studio configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby & Craft Studio →

🎯 16×20

Motorcycle & ATV Barn

16×20 motorcycle & atv barn configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Motorcycle & ATV Barn →

🎯 16×20

Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage

16×20 lawn & garden equipment storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lawn & Garden Equipment Storage →

🌾 16×20

Small Livestock Run-In Shelter

16×20 small livestock run-in shelter configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Livestock Run-In Shelter →

🌾 16×20

Feed & Tack Storage

16×20 feed & tack storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$5,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Feed & Tack Storage →

🏢 16×20

Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup

16×20 jobsite tool & equipment lockup configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Jobsite Tool & Equipment Lockup →

🏢 16×20

Small Business Overflow Storage

16×20 small business overflow storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$6,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Small Business Overflow Storage →

🏡 16×20

Metal Carport

16×20 metal carport configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Metal Carport →

🎯 16×20

Lake House Boat & Gear Shed

16×20 lake house boat & gear shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$4,750Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Lake House Boat & Gear Shed →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Storefront questions, answered.

How much does a 16×20 small business storefront cost?

A 16×20 small business storefront from Steel and Stud starts at $6,600 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $138/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 16×20 small business storefront price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business storefront ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 16×20 small business storefront?

Almost always for 320+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business storefront different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 16×20 small business storefront need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 16×20 small business storefront delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 16×20 small business storefront without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $138/month on a 16×20 small business storefront.

What warranty comes with the 16×20 small business storefront?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 16×20 small business storefront in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 16×20 small business storefront meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Storefront quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red prefab metal building storefront with large windows and covered side entry

16×20 Small Business Storefront

320 sq ft for storage shed, hobby room, or pool house

16′ x 20′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 16×20 steel building delivers 320 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$6,600.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Green metal workshop at twilight with open roll-up door revealing a lit steel garage work area

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×35 when a basic 18×35 feels cramped.

You’re viewing:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 14 GA Frame
  • 9×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Fits Full-Size Truck
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-SINGLE-CAR-GARAGBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench layout.

Our 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Homeowners pick the 18×35 when a basic 18×35 feels cramped and a 18×35 feels excessive. You park one full-size F-150 or SUV, then keep the back 8 feet for a workbench, tool wall, and a small parts shelf. Plenty of room to walk around the truck with the doors open.

💡 Pro tip:Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench.

DAILY USEEveryday single-car garage with workshop bench
Everyday single-car garage with workshop bench
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a single-car garage with workshop bench.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsingle-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
single-car garage with workshop bench + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench cost?

A 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud single-car garage with workshop bench different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 single-car garage with workshop bench typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Green metal workshop at twilight with open roll-up door revealing a lit steel garage work area

18×35 Single-Car Garage with Workshop Bench

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with copper roof, brown wainscoting and roll-up door in sunset hills

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, built for daily backyard use.

Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a.

You’re viewing:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Upgrade
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Hobbyist Favorite
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-BACKYARD-WORKSHOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists layout.

Looking for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits homeowners adding garage, workshop, or hobby space. Woodworkers, leather crafters, and small-engine hobbyists buy this size for a dedicated shop separate from the house. 630 sq ft handles a table saw, drill press, router table, dust collection, and a 6-foot workbench with shelving overhead. A 36-inch walk-in door keeps deliveries clean.

💡 Pro tip:Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists.

DAILY USEEveryday backyard workshop for hobbyists
Everyday backyard workshop for hobbyists
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a backyard workshop for hobbyists.
STORAGE OVERFLOWbackyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
backyard workshop for hobbyists + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists cost?

A 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud backyard workshop for hobbyists different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 backyard workshop for hobbyists typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Cream metal workshop with copper roof, brown wainscoting and roll-up door in sunset hills

18×35 Backyard Workshop for Hobbyists

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Red steel building with black wainscot, roll-up door and glowing windows at dusk

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet.

You’re viewing:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 16′ Wide Roll-Up
  • Two-Car Capable
  • Concrete Anchors
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-TWO-COMPACT-CARSBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side layout.

Our 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Two compact sedans or a small SUV plus a sedan fit at 18 feet wide if you’re careful with the doors. Most buyers pair this with a single 16-foot roll-up door for both bays. You won’t have room for storage along the walls, but you will get both cars under steel.

💡 Pro tip:Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side.

DAILY USEEveryday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
Everyday two compact cars tucked side-by-side
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a two compact cars tucked side-by-side.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtwo compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
two compact cars tucked side-by-side + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side cost?

A 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud two compact cars tucked side-by-side different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 two compact cars tucked side-by-side typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Red steel building with black wainscot, roll-up door and glowing windows at dusk

18×35 Two Compact Cars Tucked Side-by-Side

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Home Office and Hobby Room

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room, built for daily backyard use.

Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×35 into a fully.

You’re viewing:Home Office and Hobby Room·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • R-19 Insulation
  • Mini-Split Ready
  • Detached Office
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-HOME-OFFICE-HOBBBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 home office and hobby room.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Home Office and Hobby Room layout.

Our 18×35 home office and hobby room fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a finished daily-use building without contractor pricing. Remote workers and small property owners convert the 18×35 into a fully insulated detached office. R-19 fiberglass batt insulation, a mini-split HVAC unit, and a partition wall give you a 18×35 office plus a 18×35 hobby space. Storefront windows let in natural light.

💡 Pro tip:Home Office and Hobby Room works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Home Office and Hobby Room.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Home Office and Hobby Room spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Home Office and Hobby Room.

DAILY USEEveryday home office and hobby room
Everyday home office and hobby room
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a home office and hobby room.
STORAGE OVERFLOWhome office and hobby room + seasonal storage
home office and hobby room + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 home office and hobby room is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Home Office and Hobby Room shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Home Office and Hobby Room · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Home Office and Hobby Room also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Home Office and Hobby Room questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 home office and hobby room cost?

A 18×35 home office and hobby room from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 home office and hobby room price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud home office and hobby room ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 home office and hobby room?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud home office and hobby room different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 home office and hobby room need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 home office and hobby room delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 home office and hobby room without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 home office and hobby room.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 home office and hobby room?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 home office and hobby room in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 18×35 home office and hobby room add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 18×35 home office and hobby room typically adds $5,040–$7,560 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Home Office and Hobby Room quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Dark green metal shed studio at evening with string lights and wreath on french doors

18×35 Home Office and Hobby Room

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black metal carport with cream trim sheltering a silver pickup and UTV near mountains

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,950

12

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,350$9,950SAVE $1,400
or $207/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×35 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility.

You’re viewing:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,950$11,350Save $1,400
or as low as $207/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$8,100
18×35
this size
$9,950
18×36
longer
$10,200
20×35
wider
$11,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up Door
  • Gravel Anchors OK
  • Rural Workhorse
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-ATV-MOWER-LAWN-EBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft shop

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage space. Gardeners and rural property owners use the 18×35 as a dedicated equipment shed. You’ll fit a zero-turn mower, two ATVs, a small utility trailer, plus shelving for fuel cans, blowers, trimmers, and chainsaws. A double-wide barn door makes loading and unloading fast.

💡 Pro tip:ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
Everyday atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWatv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$207/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $207/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage cost?

A 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $207/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $207/month on a 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×35 atv, mower, and lawn equipment storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black metal carport with cream trim sheltering a silver pickup and UTV near mountains

18×35 ATV, Mower, and Lawn Equipment Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage | Steel and Stud, From $9,950

12

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$11,350$9,950SAVE $1,400
or $207/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, built for farm and ranch demands.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 630 sq ft holds the tractor.

You’re viewing:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,950$11,350Save $1,400
or as low as $207/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$8,100
18×35
this size
$9,950
18×36
longer
$10,200
20×35
wider
$11,000
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12′ Legs
  • Tractor Clearance
  • Lean-To Compatible
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-TRACTOR-SHED-IMPBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space.

↑ WINDOW WALL ↑Table SawBenchLumber Rack18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft shop

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of rugged tractor shed with implement storage space. Small-farm owners pick the taller 12-14′ leg height to clear a compact tractor with a front-end loader raised. 630 sq ft holds the tractor plus a brush hog, box blade, and tiller along the back wall. Optional lean-to adds outdoor covered space for round bales.

💡 Pro tip:Tractor Shed with Implement Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Tractor Shed with Implement Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday tractor shed with implement storage
Everyday tractor shed with implement storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a tractor shed with implement storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWtractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
tractor shed with implement storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$207/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $207/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Tractor Shed with Implement Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Tractor Shed with Implement Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Tractor Shed with Implement Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage cost?

A 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage from Steel and Stud starts at $9,950 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $207/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud tractor shed with implement storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $207/month on a 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 18×35 tractor shed with implement storage stand up to livestock and Midwest weather?

The 14-gauge galvanized frame is the same spec Steel and Stud uses for commercial barns, rated to 65 psf snow and 180 mph wind. Ventilation packages (ridge vent + soffit) ship standard on agricultural orders to prevent moisture buildup that would warp a wood barn.

Ready to build?

Your Tractor Shed with Implement Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Charcoal metal workshop with white roll up door and contractor pickup on gravel drive

18×35 Tractor Shed with Implement Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,950.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building auto detailing shop with black sedan in the open bay

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom | Steel and Stud, From $9,300

12

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$10,600$9,300SAVE $1,300
or $194/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, built for hobby and recreational use.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the.

You’re viewing:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$9,300$10,600Save $1,300
or as low as $194/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$7,450
18×35
this size
$9,300
18×36
longer
$9,550
20×35
wider
$10,350
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • Insulated Walls
  • Collector-Grade
  • Polished Concrete OK
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-COLLECTOR-CAR-MOBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. 18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom layout.

18×35 delivers 630 sq ft of hobby-ready collector car and motorcycle showroom space. The narrow 18′ width keeps the build affordable while the 28′ length leaves space for a lift, compressor, and tool chest behind the vehicle.

💡 Pro tip:Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom.

DAILY USEEveryday collector car and motorcycle showroom
Everyday collector car and motorcycle showroom
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a collector car and motorcycle showroom.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcollector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
collector car and motorcycle showroom + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$194/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $194/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom cost?

A 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom from Steel and Stud starts at $9,300 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $194/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud collector car and motorcycle showroom different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $194/month on a 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Can I insulate the 18×35 collector car and motorcycle showroom for year-round use?

Yes, Steel and Stud offers R-13 wall + R-19 ceiling insulation packages, and the interior is drywall-ready. Most owners finish a collector car and motorcycle showroom to a livable retreat in 2–3 weekends. Add a mini-split HVAC at checkout for full four-season comfort.

Ready to build?

Your Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Barn red steel building auto detailing shop with black sedan in the open bay

18×35 Collector Car and Motorcycle Showroom

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$9,300.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,150

12

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,700$11,150SAVE $1,550
or $232/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Small Business Inventory Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×35 as a dedicated stock room separate.

You’re viewing:Small Business Inventory Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,150$12,700Save $1,550
or as low as $232/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$9,300
18×35
this size
$11,150
18×36
longer
$11,400
20×35
wider
$12,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 10×8 Roll-Up
  • 12 Pallet Spots
  • 12′ Legs
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-SMALL-BUSINESS-IBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 small business inventory storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops.

Car 1Car 2OFFICE18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Small Business Inventory Storage layout.

Looking for a 18×35 small business inventory storage? At 630 sq ft, this footprint suits small businesses, retail, or service shops. E-commerce sellers and tradespeople buy the 18×35 as a dedicated stock room separate from the house. 630 sq ft holds 12 pallet positions on the floor or 24 with steel shelving. A 18×35 roll-up door clears a pallet jack and the height accepts standard 48-inch pallets stacked two-high.

💡 Pro tip:Small Business Inventory Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Small Business Inventory Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Small Business Inventory Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Small Business Inventory Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday small business inventory storage
Everyday small business inventory storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a small business inventory storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWsmall business inventory storage + seasonal storage
small business inventory storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$232/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 small business inventory storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $232/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Small Business Inventory Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Small Business Inventory Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Small Business Inventory Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Small Business Inventory Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 small business inventory storage cost?

A 18×35 small business inventory storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $232/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 small business inventory storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud small business inventory storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 small business inventory storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud small business inventory storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 small business inventory storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 small business inventory storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 small business inventory storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $232/month on a 18×35 small business inventory storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 small business inventory storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 small business inventory storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×35 small business inventory storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Small Business Inventory Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Black commercial metal building with full glass storefront fronting a paved parking lot

18×35 Small Business Inventory Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open equipment bays and blue tractor inside, vertical panel metal building

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage | Steel and Stud, From $11,150

12

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$12,700$11,150SAVE $1,550
or $232/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings18×35Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, engineered for code-compliant business use.

Our 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×35 as a.

You’re viewing:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage·Size18×35·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$11,150$12,700Save $1,550
or as low as $232/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 18×35
18×28
smaller
$9,300
18×35
this size
$11,150
18×36
longer
$11,400
20×35
wider
$12,200
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 630 sq ft enclosed
  • 12 GA Frame
  • Theft-Resistant
  • Keypad Entry
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-18X35-CONTRACTOR-JOB-SBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

18 feet wide × 35 feet long. Our 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP18′ × 35′ · 630 sq ft

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage layout.

Our 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage fits 18-foot widths and 35-foot lengths to give you a code-passing shell delivered in 4–6 weeks. Plumbing, electrical, and HVAC contractors use the 18×35 as a secure base for tools, fittings, copper, and conduit. The 12-gauge frame upgrade plus locking walk-in door and roll-up combo gives you fast load-in and theft resistance. Stamped drawings keep you compliant with county code.

💡 Pro tip:Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage works well at 18×35, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
630 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 18×35 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage spec sheet.

Width18′
Length35′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space630 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage.

DAILY USEEveryday contractor job-site tool and material storage
Everyday contractor job-site tool and material storage
630 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a contractor job-site tool and material storage.
STORAGE OVERFLOWcontractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
contractor job-site tool and material storage + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage, what makes it different.

630sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$232/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $232/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 18×35?

630 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 18′ × 35′ footprint with 630 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $5,040–$7,560 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 18×35 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 18×35 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
19×36×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$2,835+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage also viewed:

🏡 18×35

One-Car Garage with Workshop

18×35 one-car garage with workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize One-Car Garage with Workshop →

🎯 18×35

RV Cover with Storage

18×35 rv cover with storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize RV Cover with Storage →

🏡 18×35

Detached Workshop

18×35 detached workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Detached Workshop →

🌾 18×35

Hobby Farm Utility Building

18×35 hobby farm utility building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Hobby Farm Utility Building →

🏡 18×35

Truck and Trailer Garage

18×35 truck and trailer garage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Trailer Garage →

🎯 18×35

Man Cave / She Shed

18×35 man cave / she shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Man Cave / She Shed →

🏢 18×35

Contractor Storage Shop

18×35 contractor storage shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Contractor Storage Shop →

🌾 18×35

Horse Stall and Tack Building

18×35 horse stall and tack building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Horse Stall and Tack Building →

🏡 18×35

Carport with Storage Room

18×35 carport with storage room configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Carport with Storage Room →

🏢 18×35

Fabrication & Welding Shop

18×35 fabrication & welding shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$11,150Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication & Welding Shop →

🌾 18×35

Equipment Lean-To Shed

18×35 equipment lean-to shed configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,950Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Equipment Lean-To Shed →

🎯 18×35

Boat and Toy Storage

18×35 boat and toy storage configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$9,300Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Boat and Toy Storage →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage questions, answered.

How much does a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage cost?

A 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage from Steel and Stud starts at $11,150 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $232/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Almost always for 630+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud contractor job-site tool and material storage different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $232/month on a 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage.

What warranty comes with the 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does the 18×35 contractor job-site tool and material storage meet IBC commercial code?

Yes. Steel and Stud’s 12-gauge frame upgrade and 26-gauge sheeting both meet IBC commercial standards, and most counties accept our stamped drawings without revision. Engineered loads ship with the order, typical certified specs are 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow.

Ready to build?

Your Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Forest green steel barn with open equipment bays and blue tractor inside, vertical panel metal building

18×35 Contractor Job-Site Tool and Material Storage

630 sq ft for compact garage, RV cover, or carport

18′ x 35′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 18×35 steel building delivers 630 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$11,150.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Matte graphite prefab metal building with monitor roof and white pickup truck at the bay

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations | Steel and Stud, From $164,750

12

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$187,800$164,750SAVE $23,050
or $3432/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, built for daily backyard use.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space. Multiple 100×90 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

You’re viewing:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$164,750$187,800Save $23,050
or as low as $3432/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$146,450
100×90
this size
$164,750
100×100
longer
$174,500
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $54,500
  • Vertical Roof
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-FLEET-GARAGE-VEHBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space.

Pickup #1Pickup #2Workshop area100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations layout.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations space. Multiple 100×90 roll-ups along the long wall keep crew mornings moving without bottlenecks at the door.

💡 Pro tip:Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations.

DAILY USEEveryday fleet garage / vehicle operations
Everyday fleet garage / vehicle operations
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a fleet garage / vehicle operations.
STORAGE OVERFLOWfleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
fleet garage / vehicle operations + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3432/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3432/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations cost?

A 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations from Steel and Stud starts at $164,750 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3432/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud fleet garage / vehicle operations different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3432/month on a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Does a 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations add resale value to my home?

An enclosed 100×90 fleet garage / vehicle operations typically adds $72,000–$108,000 in resale value per regional comp data, and most insurance carriers reduce premiums for indoor vehicle / equipment storage. Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust warranty transfers to the next owner.

Ready to build?

Your Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Matte graphite prefab metal building with monitor roof and white pickup truck at the bay

100×90 Fleet Garage / Vehicle Operations

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$164,750.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

100×90 Manufacturing Floor

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.

100×90 Manufacturing Floor | Steel and Stud, From $167,000

12

100×90 Manufacturing Floor
In stock · ships 3–5 wk
Starting from$190,400$167,000SAVE $23,400
or $3479/mo · $0 down · no credit check

HomeMetal Buildings100×90Manufacturing Floor

★★★★★4.8(verified buyers)✓ Verified Buyers

100×90 Manufacturing Floor, rated for heavy-duty industrial loads.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing floor space. Column-free 10,9000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges. Reinforced.

You’re viewing:Manufacturing Floor·Size100×90·Slate Gray
Starting from your selected configuration$167,000$190,400Save $23,400
or as low as $3479/mo · 0% APR · No credit RTO
ℹ️This is an estimate. Final pricing is locked after our sales team reviews your complete requirements (site access, ground type, county-specific certifications, optional upgrades). You’ll receive a written all-in quote within one business day of your request, no surprises, no hidden fees.
📐 Size footprint dimensionsSelected: 100×90
100×80
smaller
$148,700
100×90
this size
$167,000
100×100
longer
$176,750
📏 Side wall height interior headroomSelected: 9′
7′
8′
9′
10′ +$340
12′ +$640
14′ +$1180
🎨 Roof & trim color applied to building aboveSelected: Slate Gray
Slate Gray

🔧 Customize your build 9 options affect your price
🏗️

Roof Stylevertical sheds snow/leaves naturally
🚪

Roll-Up Doorsfront-mounted garage doors
🪟

Windowsnatural light + ventilation
🚶

Walk-In Doorside entry with deadbolt
🌡️

Insulation Packageyear-round comfort & energy savings
🔩

Frame Gaugestructural steel thickness
📋

Sheeting Gaugeroof + side panel thickness

Anchoring Typefoundation attachment method

Electrical Pre-Wireconduit run for licensed electrician
Customizations selected:
Customization subtotal:+$485
  • 9,000 sq ft enclosed
  • From $68,000
  • Crane Ready
  • 12 Gauge
  • 180 mph wind certified
  • 65 psf snow load
  • 20-year rust warranty
  • Free delivery + install
🚚
FREE delivery & installation in all 48 states. Concrete, asphalt, or compacted gravel.
SKU:SS-100X90-MANUFACTURING-FLBuilt:1,847+Since: 2002Made in: 🇺🇸 USA
🛡️
A+
BBB Accredited
4.8/5
customer rating
Since 2004
In Business
🏠
15,000+
Buildings
🇺🇸
48
States Served
We’ve provided builds for
FordAppleDiscovery ChannelU.S. ArmyGM
SPATIAL LAYOUT

See how 800 sq ft fits your 100×90 manufacturing floor.

100 feet wide × 90 feet long. 100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing floor space.

Pickup BayWORKSHOP100′ × 90′ · 9,000 sq ft

Manufacturing Floor layout.

100×90 delivers 9000 sq ft of heavy-duty manufacturing floor space. Column-free 10,9000 sq ft floor accommodates production lines, CNC equipment, robotic cells, conveyor systems, and overhead crane bridges. Reinforced framing supports rooftop HVAC and rooftop solar arrays without secondary structural work.

💡 Pro tip:Manufacturing Floor works well at 100×90, add insulation + electrical for year-round use.
🎨 FREE 3D BUILDER

Build your 100×90 Manufacturing Floor in 3D.

Design your building yourself in our free Sensei3D Designer, drag doors and windows where you want them, swap roof + trim colors, and see your spec from every angle. Save your design and email it to yourself for later.

  • Drag-and-drop doors, windows, walk-ins anywhere on the building
  • 16 colors applied live to roof, walls, and trim, mix & match
  • Interior + exterior views of your spec, with measurements
  • Save your design and share it with your contractor or family
  • Auto-syncs to quote, what you build is what we price
✓ No login required✓ Works on phone & desktop✓ Used by 38,000+ buyers
Sensei3D Preview
LIVE 3D · DRAG TO ROTATE
, or,

📐 Use the Cold-Form Designer (engineer-grade specs)

WHAT’S INCLUDED

Everything in your Manufacturing Floor.

All variants ship with free delivery, installation, drawings, 20-year warranty.

🏗️
9,000 sq ft enclosed
Fully-enclosed 100×90 vertical-roof structure.
🚪
Roll-up + walk-in doors
Standard configuration door package.
🔩
14-gauge steel frame
American-rolled galvanized tubing.
🎨
1 standard color
Pick from 16 factory-baked finishes.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Manufacturing Floor spec sheet.

Width100′
Length90′ + 6" overhang
Side height9′ standard
Floor space9,000 sq ft
Doors1 × 9×8 roll-up
Walk-inOptional (+$345)
WindowsOptional
Windup to 180 mph
Snowup to 65 psf
RoofVertical 3:12
Frame14 ga (12 ga upgrade)
Sheeting29 ga (26 ga upgrade)
AnchoringConcrete · Asphalt · Ground
Lead time3 – 5 weeks
USE CASE EXAMPLES

How real buyers use Manufacturing Floor.

DAILY USEEveryday manufacturing floor
Everyday manufacturing floor
9,000 sq ft is the right size for daily use of a manufacturing floor.
STORAGE OVERFLOWmanufacturing floor + seasonal storage
manufacturing floor + seasonal storage
Park or store equipment in the front half, leave the rear for seasonal storage and overflow.
FLEX ROOMExpansion-ready
Expansion-ready
Stud-framed interior makes it easy to add a partition, electrical, or insulation later.

FULL PRODUCT DETAILS

100×90 Manufacturing Floor, what makes it different.

9,000sq ft
Floor Space
180mph
Wind Rated
65psf
Snow Load
20yr
Rust Warranty
40yr
Paint Warranty
$3479/mo
From RTO
🏗️

Engineered for your county

Every 100×90 manufacturing floor is fabricated from American-rolled galvanized steel and engineered against the exact wind and snow loads your jurisdiction requires.

  • Standard: 140 mph wind / 35 psf snow
  • 12-ga upgrade: 180 mph / 65 psf
  • Permit drawings stamped and emailed free
🔩

Construction details

The same materials commercial fabricators use, not residential-grade. Hot-dip galvanized fasteners, factory-baked siliconized polyester paint, Hilti-grade anchors.

  • Frame: 14-ga (12-ga upgrade) galvanized tubing
  • Panels: 29-ga G-90 (26-ga upgrade)
  • Fasteners: #14 self-drilling with EPDM washer
🚚

Free delivery & install, really free

Regional-route delivery plus 1–2 day on-site installation by a certified crew, bundled into your headline price. No hidden unloading fees, fuel surcharges, or site-prep charges.

  • $0 deposit · pay only after walkthrough sign-off
  • 3–5 week lead time on regional routes
  • All 48 states · rush option available
🛡️

Warranty & lifespan

Engineered for a 50-year service life with industry-leading warranties on every wear surface.

  • 20-yr rust-through warranty on frame & panels
  • 40-yr paint warranty against fading + chalking
  • 1-yr craftsmanship on installation
💳

$0-down financing

Three financing paths to fit any credit situation. The rent-to-own option requires no credit pull at all, fastest path to a closed deal.

  • RTO: $3479/mo, no credit check, 36–60 mo
  • Financing: 0% promo APR · 84 mo term
  • Cash discount: 4% on $10K+ orders

Why 100×90?

9,000 sq ft sits in the sweet spot for residential and light-commercial, fits standard quarter-acre setbacks, comfortably below the 1,000 sq ft municipal threshold that triggers extra inspections.

  • 100′ × 90′ footprint with 9,000 sq ft interior
  • Permit-friendly in 96% of US counties
  • Resale ROI $72,000–$108,000 added home value

PEOPLE ALSO ASK

Common questions from Manufacturing Floor shoppers.

The questions our team hears every week. Click any to expand the short answer.

How thick is the steel on a Steel and Stud 100×90 metal building?

Standard frame: 14-gauge (1.5 mm) galvanized tubing. Optional 12-gauge upgrade (2.5 mm) for high-wind/snow zones. Roof and wall sheeting ships 29-gauge standard, 26-gauge upgrade available on order.

Does Steel and Stud deliver and install in my state?

Yes, free delivery and free installation in all 48 continental states, performed by certified Steel and Stud crews. Hawaii and Alaska use custom freight quotes; call 1-877-275-7048 for either.

What’s the typical lead time for a 100×90 building?

Standard: 3–5 weeks from order confirmation to install completion. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery and 1-2 day install close it out. Rush builds available for $345.

Can I finance a Steel and Stud building without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals typically run 8 minutes with proof of income and first month’s payment. 36–60 month terms, no early-payoff penalty.

What’s covered under the 20-year warranty?

Steel and Stud’s 20-year rust-through warranty covers the galvanized frame against perforation, plus a 20-year paint-finish warranty against fade and chalk. Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Warranty transfers to the next owner on resale.

CUSTOMER REVIEWS

What real 100×90 Manufacturing Floor buyers say.

No reviews yet for the 100×90 Manufacturing Floor

Be the first verified buyer to share your experience. Honest reviews help other steel-building shoppers make a confident decision.

✍ Write the first review


HAVE A QUESTION?

Talk to a real metal-building specialist.

Our team has installed 15,000+ buildings. We answer technical, permit, and financing questions every day, usually in under 8 minutes.

Complete your Manufacturing Floor · Save 10% bundled

These add-ons ship and install with the same crew.

Browse all 28 add-ons →

Bundle & Save

🏗️
Concrete Pad Pour
101×91×4″ slab to engineered spec.
$40,500+ Add
Most Added

🌡
R-19 Insulation Package
Roof & wall batt, vinyl-faced.
$1,795+ Add
💧
Gutter & Downspout Kit
Seamless aluminum, color-matched.
$485+ Add
200-Amp Sub-Panel Pre-Wire
Conduit + sub-panel housing.
$695+ Add
CONSIDERING ALTERNATIVES?

Buyers who chose Manufacturing Floor also viewed:

🏢 100×90

Distribution Center

100×90 distribution center configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Distribution Center →

🏭 100×90

Warehouse Steel Building

100×90 warehouse steel building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Warehouse Steel Building →

🏭 100×90

Manufacturing Facility

100×90 manufacturing facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Manufacturing Facility →

🏢 100×90

Commercial Workshop

100×90 commercial workshop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Commercial Workshop →

🏢 100×90

Aircraft Hangar

100×90 aircraft hangar configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Aircraft Hangar →

🌾 100×90

Agricultural Metal Building

100×90 agricultural metal building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Agricultural Metal Building →

🏭 100×90

Cold Storage Building

100×90 cold storage building configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Cold Storage Building →

🌾 100×90

Riding Arena

100×90 riding arena configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$165,400Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Riding Arena →

🏭 100×90

Fabrication Shop

100×90 fabrication shop configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Fabrication Shop →

🏢 100×90

Self-Storage Facility

100×90 self-storage facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Self-Storage Facility →

🏭 100×90

Truck and Fleet Maintenance

100×90 truck and fleet maintenance configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$167,000Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Truck and Fleet Maintenance →

🏢 100×90

Indoor Sports Facility

100×90 indoor sports facility configuration, free delivery, free installation, 20-year warranty.

$166,600Vertical Roof14 Gauge
✓ Free Install✓ 20-Yr Warranty

Customize Indoor Sports Facility →

FREQUENTLY ASKED

Manufacturing Floor questions, answered.

How much does a 100×90 manufacturing floor cost?

A 100×90 manufacturing floor from Steel and Stud starts at $167,000 with free delivery and free installation across all 48 states. Most buyers pick the rent-to-own option at about $3479/month with $0 down and no credit check. Call 1-877-275-7048 for a same-day price lock.

Is delivery and installation included in the 100×90 manufacturing floor price?

Yes, every Steel and Stud manufacturing floor ships with free delivery + free installation by a certified crew, included in the listed price. Anchored to a concrete pad, asphalt, or compacted gravel, your building is fully erected in 1–2 days after the truck arrives.

Do I need a permit for a 100×90 manufacturing floor?

Almost always for 9,000+ sq ft enclosed buildings. Steel and Stud emails engineered drawings stamped for your wind zone (up to 180 mph) and snow zone (up to 65 psf) at no charge, so your local building department has everything it needs. Permit timing typically runs 2–6 weeks by jurisdiction.

How is a Steel and Stud manufacturing floor different from a wood-frame build?

Steel solves the problems wood creates, no rotting, no termites, no warping, no painting every 3 years. Our 14-gauge galvanized frame carries a 20-year rust warranty and ships with a 180 mph wind / 65 psf snow rating already engineered in. A comparable wood build typically costs 2–3× more and needs ongoing maintenance.

What foundation does a 100×90 manufacturing floor need?

A 4-inch concrete pad poured 1 foot wider and longer than the building is the standard. Steel and Stud also anchors to asphalt or compacted gravel for open or semi-enclosed configurations. A pad-pour bundle is offered at checkout if you don’t already have a slab.

How fast can I get a 100×90 manufacturing floor delivered?

Standard lead time is 3–5 weeks from order to install. Fabrication runs the first 2–3 weeks at our US plant; regional delivery + 1–2-day install by a certified Steel and Stud crew closes out the order. Rush builds are available, call 1-877-275-7048 for current capacity.

Can I finance a 100×90 manufacturing floor without a credit check?

Yes, Steel and Stud’s rent-to-own partner does not pull credit. Approvals close in about 8 minutes with proof of income and your first month’s payment. Terms run 36–60 months with no early-payoff penalty, and the monthly works out to roughly $3479/month on a 100×90 manufacturing floor.

What warranty comes with the 100×90 manufacturing floor?

Steel and Stud backs every building with a 20-year rust-through warranty on the galvanized frame and a 10-year sheeting warranty on the 29-gauge panels (upgradeable to 26-gauge or 12-gauge). Workmanship on the install is warrantied for 1 year. Full warranty terms ship with your order packet.

Can I customize the 100×90 manufacturing floor in 3D before I order?

Yes, our free Sensei3D Designer lets you drag and drop doors, windows, and walk-ins; swap 16 roof + trim colors live; and rotate the building in 3D from every angle. No login required. The design saves directly to a quote so what you build is exactly what we price.

Will the 100×90 manufacturing floor handle heavy equipment and forklifts?

Standard 100×90 manufacturing floor ships rated for 35 psf live load on the floor (over concrete pad), and the 12-gauge frame upgrade supports trolley- and jib-crane mounts up to 1-ton capacity. Steel and Stud engineers will spec heavier rigging on request, call 1-877-275-7048.

Ready to build?

Your Manufacturing Floor quote takes one minute.

Tell us your zip and the options you want. We’ll send back a same-day, all-in price.

✓ 4.8★ · verified buyers✓ BBB A+✓ 24 years✓ $0 deposit · pay after install





$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from \/mo — No credit check
Khaki prefab metal building with white roll-up door and bollards in a desert industrial yard

100×90 Manufacturing Floor

9,000 sq ft for warehouse, distribution center, or commercial workshop

100′ x 90′ 14 Gauge Local Certification Available
Pre-engineered 100×90 steel building delivers 9,000 sq ft of column-free space. Galvanized 14-gauge tubular frame, vertical roof, and certified wind and snow load ratings. Customize doors, windows, colors, eave height, and certifications in our free 3D builder.
Leg height adjustable up to 20'

$167,000.00

Free Delivery & Install RTO from /mo — No credit check

NOT SURE WHICH SIZE? BUILD YOUR METAL GARAGE IN 3D AND SEE YOUR PRICE INSTANTLY

Flexible Payment Options

Finance Your Metal Garage

Three ways to own your enclosed steel garage building. No hidden fees. Balance due only after installation is complete.

Monthly Financing

Affordable monthly payments, competitive rates.

Down PaymentVaries by lender
MonthlyAs low as $89/mo
Terms12 to 72 months
Credit CheckRequired
Best ForLarger structures
Check My Rate

Rent-to-Own

No credit check. Low monthly payments.

Down PaymentFirst month only
MonthlyAs low as $49/mo
Terms24 to 60 months
Credit CheckNot required
Best ForBudget-friendly option
Start RTO Application
Instant Estimate

Metal Garages Price Calculator

Enter your desired dimensions and options below for an instant price estimate. Contact us for a certified, site-specific quote.

ESTIMATED PRICE RANGE $9,200 - $10,300

Estimate based on standard configuration. Contact us for exact certified pricing.

View Presets, Inventory Matches & Details

Presets & Calculator Data

Custom estimate

Enter a size and state to generate an estimated range and route correctly.

Size Selected 24 × 40 × 10
Floor Area 960 sq ft
Location FactorStandard
Inventory MatchNo exact match
Recommended Path3D Builder

Inventory Alternatives

Why Steel and Stud

6 Reasons to Choose a Steel Garage

An enclosed prefabricated steel garage is the most durable and cost-effective way to protect your vehicles, tools, equipment and personal property. Here is why property owners across 48 states chose Steel and Stud.

🔒

Fully Enclosed Protection

Every metal garage comes with complete enclosure: steel roof panels, wall panels on all four sides, a standard garage door and a walk-in entry door. Your vehicles, tools and stored belongings stay protected from weather, theft and pests year round.

🧮

Free Installation Included

Every tubular steel garage order includes free professional installation by a certified crew across all 48 contiguous states. No hidden assembly fees or subcontractor surprises. Confirm your site is level and the crew handles everything else.

🌟

20-Year Warranty on 12-Gauge

Our 12-gauge galvanized steel frames carry a 20-year limited rust-through warranty backed by the manufacturer. Enclosed garages especially benefit from 12-gauge because walls and doors create higher wind load requirements than open carports.

💰

Factory-Direct Pricing

We work with multiple manufacturers and cut out distributor markups. Our prefab steel garages typically cost 40 to 60 percent less than comparable stick-built, wood-frame or concrete block construction for the same footprint and clearance height.

🎨

Full 3D Customization

Use our free 3D building designer to configure every detail of your garage: door placement, window locations, lean-to additions, insulation, wainscot, 12 panel colors for roof, walls and trim, and certification options for your climate zone.

Engineered for Your Climate

All enclosed garage structures are designed to meet local wind speed and snow load requirements. 140 MPH wind plus 25 PSF snow certification is available for high-wind coastal zones, heavy-snow mountain regions and tornado-prone states.

Verified Reviews

What Our Customers Say

Real customers, real installs. See why 15,000+ property owners chose Steel and Stud for their Metal Garages.

★★★★★
4.8 out of 5 based on 2,847 verified customer reviews
★★★★★

"We are very happy with our carport. Even though there was a delay with the installation due to weather, we are glad we went with Steel and Stud."

RG
Robert G.
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"I had a tight schedule. Bill kept in touch and did everything that he promised."

RS
Ron Sigrist
Verified Customer
Metal Carport
★★★★★

"All my questions were answered and I believe I got the best possible deal. The installation went very smoothly and was completed in one day even though scheduled to take two. The crew of four arrived at 8AM and worked through to 10PM."

VB
Verified Buyer
Verified Customer
Steel Garage
Common Questions

Metal Garages FAQ

Everything you need to know before ordering your steel carport: pricing, installation, permits, warranties, anchoring and dimensions.

Metal garage prices from Steel and Stud start at $6,775 for a standard 20x30x10 enclosed garage. Two-car garages (24x40) range from $9,135 to $16,500 depending on your state, roof style and gauge. Triple-wide garages (30x30 to 30x40) start around $10,688. All tubular steel garage prices include free delivery and professional installation.

Every tubular steel garage order includes full enclosure (roof, walls, and end panels), one standard garage door, one walk-in door, free delivery to your job site, and professional installation by a certified crew. You can add extra doors, windows, lean-tos, insulation and color upgrades through the 3D designer before ordering.

Yes. You can place garage doors on any wall (front, side, or back entry), add roll-up or sectional doors, include polycarbonate or diamond windows for natural light, choose from 12 panel colors, add lean-tos for covered parking, upgrade to insulated wall and roof panels, and select your preferred frame gauge and certification level.

A garage with lean-to combines a fully enclosed metal garage with an attached open or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. The lean-to provides additional covered area for outdoor parking, equipment storage, or a shaded work area without the cost of full wall enclosure. Lean-tos can be added to the left, right, front, or back of the main building.

A concrete slab is strongly recommended for enclosed metal garages. It provides a level floor surface, prevents moisture intrusion from the ground, and allows secure concrete anchor bolt attachment. Ground and gravel installations are available but better suited for open-sided structures. Contact us before pouring your slab to confirm exact dimensions and anchor bolt placement.

Most standard two-car metal garages (20x30 to 24x40) are assembled in one day by a professional crew. Larger triple-wide garages or structures with attached lean-tos may take up to two days. The lead time from order confirmation to installation date is typically 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location and seasonal demand.

12-gauge galvanized steel frames (2.5mm thick) are recommended for enclosed garages. Fully enclosed buildings handle more wind load and snow weight than open carports, and the thicker 12-gauge framing provides the structural integrity needed for long-term performance. 12-gauge frames also carry a 20-year rust-through warranty. 14-gauge (1.9mm) is available at a lower price for moderate climates.

Yes. Our 3D building designer allows you to place garage doors on any wall, including the long side walls. Side-entry garages are popular on narrow lots where the driveway runs parallel to the structure, or when you want the front wall facing the street without a visible garage door opening.

Yes. Steel and Stud offers three flexible payment paths: (1) Standard Payment with a deposit now and balance after install at zero interest; (2) Monthly Financing with competitive rates from $89/mo over 12 to 72 months and a soft credit pull; and (3) Rent-to-Own (RTO) as low as $49/mo with no credit check, first month as down payment, and an early buyout option available at any time. View all financing options

Choose from 12 standard colors at no additional charge: Barn Red, Beige, Black, Brown, Burgundy, Burnished Slate, Clay, Galvalume, Green, Pewter Gray, Quaker Gray, Rawhide Tan, Royal Blue, Sandstone, Slate Blue, and White. You can select separate colors for the roof, walls, trim, and wainscot through the 3D designer. Color choices do not affect price or lead time.

Permit requirements vary by county and city. Contact your local building department before ordering to confirm setback requirements, maximum building height, and any engineering certification needs. Once plans are submitted, your deposit is non-refundable if a permit is denied for reasons other than the engineered plans themselves.

Get Your Free Quote

Request a Free Quote

Tell us about your project and a building specialist will contact you within 2 hours with a personalized, no-obligation price quote.

Why Request a Quote?

Fast ResponseAverage response time under 2 hours. Most quotes same day.
No Hidden FeesYour quote includes all standard features. Tubular orders include delivery and installation.
Low Deposit to StartDeposit varies by project scope. Balance due only after installation.
Zero ObligationGet your quote, compare options, decide when you are ready.
1-877-275-7048 Mon to Fri 8AM to 6PM EST

Metal Garage Sizes, Types and Dimensions Guide

Enclosed metal garage dimensions follow a standard width x length x leg height format. Standard garages range from 12 to 24 feet wide, with lengths from 21 to 100 feet in standard increments. Triple-wide garages span 26 to 30 feet for three-car or commercial layouts. Leg height starts at 6 feet and goes up to 30 feet for the tallest structures, with 10 and 12-foot clearance being the most common choices for residential enclosed garages.

Standard garages (20 to 24 feet wide, 20 to 40 feet long) are the most popular category and accommodate two vehicles with room for side storage, a workbench, or wall-mounted tool systems. A 20x30 garage provides roughly 600 square feet of enclosed space, while a 24x40 gives you 960 square feet of fully protected interior. Triple-wide garages (26 to 30 feet wide) are built for three or more vehicles, commercial fleet parking, or combined vehicle storage and workshop layouts.

Garage with lean-to configurations combine an enclosed garage with an attached open-sided or semi-enclosed lean-to roof on one or more sides. This design gives you the security of a locked enclosed garage for your primary vehicles while providing additional covered parking, equipment shelter, or a shaded outdoor workspace at a fraction of the cost of full enclosure.

How Much Does a Metal Garage Cost in 2026?

Metal garage prices in 2026 start at $9,775 for a standard 30x30x10 enclosed garage and go up to $21,000 or more for large triple-wide structures with lean-tos. All tubular steel garage prices from Steel and Stud include free delivery and professional installation by a certified crew.

Key pricing factors include: Width (wider garages carry heavier framing), Length (additional bays add cost proportionally), Leg Height (taller structures need reinforced legs), Roof Style (vertical adds approximately 15% over regular), Frame Gauge (12-gauge adds roughly 12% over 14-gauge but adds a 20-year warranty), and Lean-To Additions (each lean-to adds roughly 20 to 30 percent to the base price depending on dimensions).

Prices also vary by state due to regional manufacturing and delivery logistics. Coastal and mountain states with higher certification requirements (140 MPH wind, 25 PSF snow load) carry higher base prices. Contact us with your ZIP code for an exact quote that reflects your specific location.

Choosing the Right Metal Garage for Your Property

Selecting the right enclosed steel garage depends on what you plan to store, how much workspace you need, and the physical constraints of your building site. A one-car garage (12 to 18 feet wide) works for a single vehicle, motorcycle collection, or dedicated workshop. A two-car garage (20 to 24 feet wide) is the most versatile option for residential properties, fitting two standard vehicles with room for seasonal storage. A three-car or triple-wide garage (26 to 30 feet wide) serves families with multiple vehicles, commercial operators storing fleet vehicles, or hobbyists who need a large workshop alongside vehicle bays.

Consider your door placement carefully. Front-entry garages with the door on the short wall are standard, but side-entry configurations are ideal for narrow lots, L-shaped driveways, or properties where you want the long wall to face the street for a cleaner appearance. Our 3D designer lets you place doors, windows and lean-tos exactly where you need them before ordering.

Metal Garage Installation: What to Expect

After placing your order and submitting your deposit, the manufacturer assigns a professional installation crew for your region. Current lead times run 4 to 8 weeks depending on your location, structure size, certification requirements, and seasonal demand. You will be contacted within 60 days to schedule your installation date.

Site requirements before the crew arrives: a flat, level concrete slab (strongly recommended for enclosed garages), clear vehicle access for the delivery truck, and any permits posted or available. The crew typically completes a standard 20x30 or 24x40 garage in one full day. Triple-wide garages and structures with lean-tos may take up to two days.

Balance payment is made directly to the manufacturer after your garage is installed and you confirm satisfaction. Financing and rent-to-own options are available through Steel and Stud for customers who prefer monthly payments. View financing options or request your free quote to get started today.

Related Metal Building Categories

Need something different? Explore our full range: open Metal Barns from $1,195 for basic vehicle coverage, metal barns for agricultural storage and equestrian use, tall clearance RV covers for motorhomes and fifth-wheels, barndominium shells for combined living and working space, and commercial steel buildings for warehouses, retail and industrial applications. Every category includes factory-direct pricing and professional installation on tubular steel orders.

READY TO SECURE YOUR VEHICLES WITH A METAL GARAGE?

Join 15,000+ property owners who trust our durable metal garages. Enjoy factory-direct pricing with free delivery and professional installation on all tubular steel buildings.

View Cart